self balancing robot
DESCRIPTION
Major Project ReportTRANSCRIPT
AProject Report
On
ldquoSELF BALANCING ROBOTrdquo(Major project)
Submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirementfor the award of the
Degree ofBachelor of Technology
InELECTRONICS amp COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Under the supervision of - Submitted by-
Ms Geetanjali Sharma Apurva Bhardwaj(050075) Iti Goyal(050049)
Meenakshi Kushwah(050167)
May 2009Faculty of Engineering amp Technology
Mody Institute of Technology and Science(A Deemed University Under Section 3 of the UGC Act of 1956)
Lakshmangarh-332311(Distt-Sikar)
Mody Institute of Technology and Science
( a Deemed University Under Section 3 of the UGC Act 1956)
Lakshmangarh-332311 (Dist-Sikar)
P phones (01573) 225001 to 225012 (12 lines) Fax (01573) 225042
CERTIFICATE
This is to certify that the major project entitled ldquoSELF BALANCING ROBOTrdquo
submitted by MsApurva Bhardwaj(050075) MsIti Goyal(050049) MsMeenakshi
Kushwah(050167) to department of Electronics and Communication Engineering in
partial fulfillment of requirement for the degree of Bachelor of Technology by Mody
Institute of Technology and Science Lakshmangarh is a record of the work done under
my supervision and guidance
Date MsGeetanjali Sharma (Project Supervisor) Lecturer (ECE)
2
EXAMINER CERTIFICATE
The Project entitled ldquoSELF BALANCING ROBOTrdquo submitted by Ms Apurva
Bhardwaj(ECE) Ms Iti Goyal(ECE) Ms Meenakshi Kushwah(ECE) students of
BTech VII semester are approved in partial fulfillment of the requirement of the degree
of Bachelor of Technology from the Mody Institute Of Technology and
Science Lakshmangarh Sikar
Date (Examiner)
Prof SM Sharma (HOD ECE)
3
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
ldquoPerseverance inspiration and motivation have always played a key role in any
venture It is not just the brain that matters most but that which guides them the
character the heart generous qualities and progressive forces What was conceived just
as an idea materialized slowly into concrete facts The metamorphosis took endless hours
of toil had its moments of frustration but in the end everything seemed to have senserdquo
At this level of understanding it is often difficult to understand the wide spectrum of
knowledge without proper guidance amp advice Hence we take this opportunity to express
our heartfelt gratitude to respected Ms Geetanjali Sharma who being our project guide
had faith in us enlightened us with the valuable guidance and allowed us to work on this
project
A heartfelt gratitude to Prof P K Das (Dean FET) for providing us with an opportunity
to work in the Power Electronics lab and VLSI lab as a part of the major project
We would like to thank Prof SM Sharma (HOD Electronics) for his immense interest
constant inspiration and kind co-operation throughout the period of work undertaken
We would like to pay our sincere gratitude to Mr Vijay Singh and Mr Santosh for
helping us with the technicalities of the electronics and computer lab and making our
work easier with his kind cooperation
We would also like to acknowledge our profound sense of gratitude to my Friends and
Parents for their moral support to crave out this project and above all GOD for removing
all the hurdles in the way
APURVA BHARDWAJ(050075)
ITI GOYAL(050049)
MEENAKSHI KUSHWAH(050167)
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SNO CONTENT PAGE NO
1 Abstract 6
2 Introduction 7
3 Component Description 10
4 Parallel Port 28
5 Power Supply 34
6 Circuit Description 41
7 Visual Basic 43
8 Coding 50
9 Conclusion 52
10 References 53
11 Appendix 54
5
ABSTRACT
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
System Required for this Project
PC with Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 10GB HDD amp VB60
Programmer skills
Visual Basic 60 Active Dlls ActiveX
End-user Skills
Basic Operating System handling
System Requirement
Computer Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 40Gb HDD VB60 Serial communication
port LPT Port
Hardware required
IR sensors Lasers Power supply D type 25 pin connector comparator IC
Global Application
Sky high building balancing
Precision balancing system
6
INTRODUCTION
What is a RobotA robot is an apparently human automaton intelligent and obedient but impersonal
machine Indeed the word robot comes from robota Czech for forced labour Yet as
robotics advances this definition is rapidly becoming old Basically a robot is a machine
designed to do a human job (excluding research robots) that is either tedious slow or
hazardous It is only relatively recently that robots have started to employ a degree of
Artificial Intelligence in their work - many robots required human operators or precise
guidance throughout their missions Slowly robots are becoming more and more
autonomous
The difference between robots and machinery is the presence of autonomy flexibility and
precision Indeed many few robots are mere extensions of machinery - but as the field
advances more and more the current fine line will widen more and more
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields Let us back-track
though and look at what could constitute a robot
Robotics is an absolutely fascinating field that interests most people - AI buff or not As
research from more serious robotics projects such as Cog and Kismet filter down into the
commercial arena we should look forward to some very interesting (and cheap) virtual
pets like Aibo and the furbies Hopefully commercial home-based robots will also be
available for a price not more than an expensive vacuum cleaner With computers
becoming more and more powerful interfacing home robots with your computer will
become a reality and house work will (hopefully) disappear
7
WHATrsquoS IN A ROBOT
Basically a robot consists of
A mechanical device such as a wheeled platform arm or other construction
capable of interacting with its environment
Sensors on or around the device that are able to sense the environment and give
useful feedback to the device
Systems that process sensory input in the context of the devices current situation
and instruct the device to perform actions in response to the situation
Mechanical platforms -- the hardware base
A robot consists of two main parts the robot body and some form of artificial
intelligence (AI) system Many different body parts can be called a robot Articulated
arms are used in welding and painting gantry and conveyor systems move parts in
factories and giant robotic machines move earth deep inside mines One of the most
interesting aspects of robots in general is their behavior which requires a form of
intelligence The simplest behavior of a robot is locomotion Typically wheels are used
as the underlying mechanism to make a robot move from one point to the next And some
force such as electricity is required to make the wheels turn under command
Motors
A variety of electric motors provide power to robots allowing them to move material
parts tools or specialized devices with various programmed motions The efficiency
rating of a motor describes how much of the electricity consumed is converted to
mechanical energy
Power supplies
Power supplies are generally provided by two types of battery Primary batteries are used
once and then discarded secondary batteries operate from a (mostly) reversible chemical
reaction and can be recharged several times Primary batteries have higher density and a
lower self-discharge rate Secondary (rechargeable) batteries have less energy than
8
primary batteries but can be recharged up to a thousand times depending on their
chemistry and environment
Sensors
Regardless of sensor hardware or software sensing and sensors can be thought of as
interacting with external events (in other words the outside world) The sensor measures
some attribute of the world The term transducer is often used interchangeably with
sensor A transducer is the mechanism or element of the sensor that transforms the
energy associated with what is being measured into another form of energy A sensor
receives energy and transmits a signal to a display or computer Sensors use transducers
to change the input signal (sound light pressure temperature etc) into an analog or
digital form capable of being used by a robot
Microcontroller systems
Microcontrollers (MCUs) are intelligent electronic devices used inside robots They
deliver functions similar to those performed by a microprocessor (central processing unit
or CPU) inside a personal computer MCUs are slower and can address less memory than
CPUs but are designed for real-world control problems One of the major differences
between CPUs and MCUs is the number of external components needed to operate them
MCUs can often run with zero external parts and typically need only an external crystal
or oscillator
There are four basic aspects of a microcontroller speed size memory and other Speed
is designated in clock cycles and is usually measured in millions of cycles per second
(Megahertz MHz) The use of the cycles varies in different MCUs affecting the usable
speed of the processor Size specifies the number of bits of information the MCU can
process in one step -- the size of its natural cluster of information
9
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Resistors
Example Circuit symbol
Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is
placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current
passing through the LED
Connecting and soldering
Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged
by heat when soldering
Resistor values - the resistor colour code
Resistance is measured in ohms the symbol for ohm is an omega
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and M
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000
Resistor values are normally shown using coloured bands
Each colour represents a number as shown in the table
Most resistors have 4 bands
The first band gives the first digit
The second band gives the second digit
The third band indicates the number of zeros
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor this may
be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given below
The Resistor
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
White 9
10
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Mody Institute of Technology and Science
( a Deemed University Under Section 3 of the UGC Act 1956)
Lakshmangarh-332311 (Dist-Sikar)
P phones (01573) 225001 to 225012 (12 lines) Fax (01573) 225042
CERTIFICATE
This is to certify that the major project entitled ldquoSELF BALANCING ROBOTrdquo
submitted by MsApurva Bhardwaj(050075) MsIti Goyal(050049) MsMeenakshi
Kushwah(050167) to department of Electronics and Communication Engineering in
partial fulfillment of requirement for the degree of Bachelor of Technology by Mody
Institute of Technology and Science Lakshmangarh is a record of the work done under
my supervision and guidance
Date MsGeetanjali Sharma (Project Supervisor) Lecturer (ECE)
2
EXAMINER CERTIFICATE
The Project entitled ldquoSELF BALANCING ROBOTrdquo submitted by Ms Apurva
Bhardwaj(ECE) Ms Iti Goyal(ECE) Ms Meenakshi Kushwah(ECE) students of
BTech VII semester are approved in partial fulfillment of the requirement of the degree
of Bachelor of Technology from the Mody Institute Of Technology and
Science Lakshmangarh Sikar
Date (Examiner)
Prof SM Sharma (HOD ECE)
3
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
ldquoPerseverance inspiration and motivation have always played a key role in any
venture It is not just the brain that matters most but that which guides them the
character the heart generous qualities and progressive forces What was conceived just
as an idea materialized slowly into concrete facts The metamorphosis took endless hours
of toil had its moments of frustration but in the end everything seemed to have senserdquo
At this level of understanding it is often difficult to understand the wide spectrum of
knowledge without proper guidance amp advice Hence we take this opportunity to express
our heartfelt gratitude to respected Ms Geetanjali Sharma who being our project guide
had faith in us enlightened us with the valuable guidance and allowed us to work on this
project
A heartfelt gratitude to Prof P K Das (Dean FET) for providing us with an opportunity
to work in the Power Electronics lab and VLSI lab as a part of the major project
We would like to thank Prof SM Sharma (HOD Electronics) for his immense interest
constant inspiration and kind co-operation throughout the period of work undertaken
We would like to pay our sincere gratitude to Mr Vijay Singh and Mr Santosh for
helping us with the technicalities of the electronics and computer lab and making our
work easier with his kind cooperation
We would also like to acknowledge our profound sense of gratitude to my Friends and
Parents for their moral support to crave out this project and above all GOD for removing
all the hurdles in the way
APURVA BHARDWAJ(050075)
ITI GOYAL(050049)
MEENAKSHI KUSHWAH(050167)
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SNO CONTENT PAGE NO
1 Abstract 6
2 Introduction 7
3 Component Description 10
4 Parallel Port 28
5 Power Supply 34
6 Circuit Description 41
7 Visual Basic 43
8 Coding 50
9 Conclusion 52
10 References 53
11 Appendix 54
5
ABSTRACT
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
System Required for this Project
PC with Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 10GB HDD amp VB60
Programmer skills
Visual Basic 60 Active Dlls ActiveX
End-user Skills
Basic Operating System handling
System Requirement
Computer Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 40Gb HDD VB60 Serial communication
port LPT Port
Hardware required
IR sensors Lasers Power supply D type 25 pin connector comparator IC
Global Application
Sky high building balancing
Precision balancing system
6
INTRODUCTION
What is a RobotA robot is an apparently human automaton intelligent and obedient but impersonal
machine Indeed the word robot comes from robota Czech for forced labour Yet as
robotics advances this definition is rapidly becoming old Basically a robot is a machine
designed to do a human job (excluding research robots) that is either tedious slow or
hazardous It is only relatively recently that robots have started to employ a degree of
Artificial Intelligence in their work - many robots required human operators or precise
guidance throughout their missions Slowly robots are becoming more and more
autonomous
The difference between robots and machinery is the presence of autonomy flexibility and
precision Indeed many few robots are mere extensions of machinery - but as the field
advances more and more the current fine line will widen more and more
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields Let us back-track
though and look at what could constitute a robot
Robotics is an absolutely fascinating field that interests most people - AI buff or not As
research from more serious robotics projects such as Cog and Kismet filter down into the
commercial arena we should look forward to some very interesting (and cheap) virtual
pets like Aibo and the furbies Hopefully commercial home-based robots will also be
available for a price not more than an expensive vacuum cleaner With computers
becoming more and more powerful interfacing home robots with your computer will
become a reality and house work will (hopefully) disappear
7
WHATrsquoS IN A ROBOT
Basically a robot consists of
A mechanical device such as a wheeled platform arm or other construction
capable of interacting with its environment
Sensors on or around the device that are able to sense the environment and give
useful feedback to the device
Systems that process sensory input in the context of the devices current situation
and instruct the device to perform actions in response to the situation
Mechanical platforms -- the hardware base
A robot consists of two main parts the robot body and some form of artificial
intelligence (AI) system Many different body parts can be called a robot Articulated
arms are used in welding and painting gantry and conveyor systems move parts in
factories and giant robotic machines move earth deep inside mines One of the most
interesting aspects of robots in general is their behavior which requires a form of
intelligence The simplest behavior of a robot is locomotion Typically wheels are used
as the underlying mechanism to make a robot move from one point to the next And some
force such as electricity is required to make the wheels turn under command
Motors
A variety of electric motors provide power to robots allowing them to move material
parts tools or specialized devices with various programmed motions The efficiency
rating of a motor describes how much of the electricity consumed is converted to
mechanical energy
Power supplies
Power supplies are generally provided by two types of battery Primary batteries are used
once and then discarded secondary batteries operate from a (mostly) reversible chemical
reaction and can be recharged several times Primary batteries have higher density and a
lower self-discharge rate Secondary (rechargeable) batteries have less energy than
8
primary batteries but can be recharged up to a thousand times depending on their
chemistry and environment
Sensors
Regardless of sensor hardware or software sensing and sensors can be thought of as
interacting with external events (in other words the outside world) The sensor measures
some attribute of the world The term transducer is often used interchangeably with
sensor A transducer is the mechanism or element of the sensor that transforms the
energy associated with what is being measured into another form of energy A sensor
receives energy and transmits a signal to a display or computer Sensors use transducers
to change the input signal (sound light pressure temperature etc) into an analog or
digital form capable of being used by a robot
Microcontroller systems
Microcontrollers (MCUs) are intelligent electronic devices used inside robots They
deliver functions similar to those performed by a microprocessor (central processing unit
or CPU) inside a personal computer MCUs are slower and can address less memory than
CPUs but are designed for real-world control problems One of the major differences
between CPUs and MCUs is the number of external components needed to operate them
MCUs can often run with zero external parts and typically need only an external crystal
or oscillator
There are four basic aspects of a microcontroller speed size memory and other Speed
is designated in clock cycles and is usually measured in millions of cycles per second
(Megahertz MHz) The use of the cycles varies in different MCUs affecting the usable
speed of the processor Size specifies the number of bits of information the MCU can
process in one step -- the size of its natural cluster of information
9
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Resistors
Example Circuit symbol
Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is
placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current
passing through the LED
Connecting and soldering
Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged
by heat when soldering
Resistor values - the resistor colour code
Resistance is measured in ohms the symbol for ohm is an omega
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and M
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000
Resistor values are normally shown using coloured bands
Each colour represents a number as shown in the table
Most resistors have 4 bands
The first band gives the first digit
The second band gives the second digit
The third band indicates the number of zeros
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor this may
be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given below
The Resistor
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
White 9
10
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
EXAMINER CERTIFICATE
The Project entitled ldquoSELF BALANCING ROBOTrdquo submitted by Ms Apurva
Bhardwaj(ECE) Ms Iti Goyal(ECE) Ms Meenakshi Kushwah(ECE) students of
BTech VII semester are approved in partial fulfillment of the requirement of the degree
of Bachelor of Technology from the Mody Institute Of Technology and
Science Lakshmangarh Sikar
Date (Examiner)
Prof SM Sharma (HOD ECE)
3
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
ldquoPerseverance inspiration and motivation have always played a key role in any
venture It is not just the brain that matters most but that which guides them the
character the heart generous qualities and progressive forces What was conceived just
as an idea materialized slowly into concrete facts The metamorphosis took endless hours
of toil had its moments of frustration but in the end everything seemed to have senserdquo
At this level of understanding it is often difficult to understand the wide spectrum of
knowledge without proper guidance amp advice Hence we take this opportunity to express
our heartfelt gratitude to respected Ms Geetanjali Sharma who being our project guide
had faith in us enlightened us with the valuable guidance and allowed us to work on this
project
A heartfelt gratitude to Prof P K Das (Dean FET) for providing us with an opportunity
to work in the Power Electronics lab and VLSI lab as a part of the major project
We would like to thank Prof SM Sharma (HOD Electronics) for his immense interest
constant inspiration and kind co-operation throughout the period of work undertaken
We would like to pay our sincere gratitude to Mr Vijay Singh and Mr Santosh for
helping us with the technicalities of the electronics and computer lab and making our
work easier with his kind cooperation
We would also like to acknowledge our profound sense of gratitude to my Friends and
Parents for their moral support to crave out this project and above all GOD for removing
all the hurdles in the way
APURVA BHARDWAJ(050075)
ITI GOYAL(050049)
MEENAKSHI KUSHWAH(050167)
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SNO CONTENT PAGE NO
1 Abstract 6
2 Introduction 7
3 Component Description 10
4 Parallel Port 28
5 Power Supply 34
6 Circuit Description 41
7 Visual Basic 43
8 Coding 50
9 Conclusion 52
10 References 53
11 Appendix 54
5
ABSTRACT
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
System Required for this Project
PC with Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 10GB HDD amp VB60
Programmer skills
Visual Basic 60 Active Dlls ActiveX
End-user Skills
Basic Operating System handling
System Requirement
Computer Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 40Gb HDD VB60 Serial communication
port LPT Port
Hardware required
IR sensors Lasers Power supply D type 25 pin connector comparator IC
Global Application
Sky high building balancing
Precision balancing system
6
INTRODUCTION
What is a RobotA robot is an apparently human automaton intelligent and obedient but impersonal
machine Indeed the word robot comes from robota Czech for forced labour Yet as
robotics advances this definition is rapidly becoming old Basically a robot is a machine
designed to do a human job (excluding research robots) that is either tedious slow or
hazardous It is only relatively recently that robots have started to employ a degree of
Artificial Intelligence in their work - many robots required human operators or precise
guidance throughout their missions Slowly robots are becoming more and more
autonomous
The difference between robots and machinery is the presence of autonomy flexibility and
precision Indeed many few robots are mere extensions of machinery - but as the field
advances more and more the current fine line will widen more and more
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields Let us back-track
though and look at what could constitute a robot
Robotics is an absolutely fascinating field that interests most people - AI buff or not As
research from more serious robotics projects such as Cog and Kismet filter down into the
commercial arena we should look forward to some very interesting (and cheap) virtual
pets like Aibo and the furbies Hopefully commercial home-based robots will also be
available for a price not more than an expensive vacuum cleaner With computers
becoming more and more powerful interfacing home robots with your computer will
become a reality and house work will (hopefully) disappear
7
WHATrsquoS IN A ROBOT
Basically a robot consists of
A mechanical device such as a wheeled platform arm or other construction
capable of interacting with its environment
Sensors on or around the device that are able to sense the environment and give
useful feedback to the device
Systems that process sensory input in the context of the devices current situation
and instruct the device to perform actions in response to the situation
Mechanical platforms -- the hardware base
A robot consists of two main parts the robot body and some form of artificial
intelligence (AI) system Many different body parts can be called a robot Articulated
arms are used in welding and painting gantry and conveyor systems move parts in
factories and giant robotic machines move earth deep inside mines One of the most
interesting aspects of robots in general is their behavior which requires a form of
intelligence The simplest behavior of a robot is locomotion Typically wheels are used
as the underlying mechanism to make a robot move from one point to the next And some
force such as electricity is required to make the wheels turn under command
Motors
A variety of electric motors provide power to robots allowing them to move material
parts tools or specialized devices with various programmed motions The efficiency
rating of a motor describes how much of the electricity consumed is converted to
mechanical energy
Power supplies
Power supplies are generally provided by two types of battery Primary batteries are used
once and then discarded secondary batteries operate from a (mostly) reversible chemical
reaction and can be recharged several times Primary batteries have higher density and a
lower self-discharge rate Secondary (rechargeable) batteries have less energy than
8
primary batteries but can be recharged up to a thousand times depending on their
chemistry and environment
Sensors
Regardless of sensor hardware or software sensing and sensors can be thought of as
interacting with external events (in other words the outside world) The sensor measures
some attribute of the world The term transducer is often used interchangeably with
sensor A transducer is the mechanism or element of the sensor that transforms the
energy associated with what is being measured into another form of energy A sensor
receives energy and transmits a signal to a display or computer Sensors use transducers
to change the input signal (sound light pressure temperature etc) into an analog or
digital form capable of being used by a robot
Microcontroller systems
Microcontrollers (MCUs) are intelligent electronic devices used inside robots They
deliver functions similar to those performed by a microprocessor (central processing unit
or CPU) inside a personal computer MCUs are slower and can address less memory than
CPUs but are designed for real-world control problems One of the major differences
between CPUs and MCUs is the number of external components needed to operate them
MCUs can often run with zero external parts and typically need only an external crystal
or oscillator
There are four basic aspects of a microcontroller speed size memory and other Speed
is designated in clock cycles and is usually measured in millions of cycles per second
(Megahertz MHz) The use of the cycles varies in different MCUs affecting the usable
speed of the processor Size specifies the number of bits of information the MCU can
process in one step -- the size of its natural cluster of information
9
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Resistors
Example Circuit symbol
Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is
placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current
passing through the LED
Connecting and soldering
Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged
by heat when soldering
Resistor values - the resistor colour code
Resistance is measured in ohms the symbol for ohm is an omega
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and M
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000
Resistor values are normally shown using coloured bands
Each colour represents a number as shown in the table
Most resistors have 4 bands
The first band gives the first digit
The second band gives the second digit
The third band indicates the number of zeros
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor this may
be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given below
The Resistor
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
White 9
10
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
ldquoPerseverance inspiration and motivation have always played a key role in any
venture It is not just the brain that matters most but that which guides them the
character the heart generous qualities and progressive forces What was conceived just
as an idea materialized slowly into concrete facts The metamorphosis took endless hours
of toil had its moments of frustration but in the end everything seemed to have senserdquo
At this level of understanding it is often difficult to understand the wide spectrum of
knowledge without proper guidance amp advice Hence we take this opportunity to express
our heartfelt gratitude to respected Ms Geetanjali Sharma who being our project guide
had faith in us enlightened us with the valuable guidance and allowed us to work on this
project
A heartfelt gratitude to Prof P K Das (Dean FET) for providing us with an opportunity
to work in the Power Electronics lab and VLSI lab as a part of the major project
We would like to thank Prof SM Sharma (HOD Electronics) for his immense interest
constant inspiration and kind co-operation throughout the period of work undertaken
We would like to pay our sincere gratitude to Mr Vijay Singh and Mr Santosh for
helping us with the technicalities of the electronics and computer lab and making our
work easier with his kind cooperation
We would also like to acknowledge our profound sense of gratitude to my Friends and
Parents for their moral support to crave out this project and above all GOD for removing
all the hurdles in the way
APURVA BHARDWAJ(050075)
ITI GOYAL(050049)
MEENAKSHI KUSHWAH(050167)
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SNO CONTENT PAGE NO
1 Abstract 6
2 Introduction 7
3 Component Description 10
4 Parallel Port 28
5 Power Supply 34
6 Circuit Description 41
7 Visual Basic 43
8 Coding 50
9 Conclusion 52
10 References 53
11 Appendix 54
5
ABSTRACT
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
System Required for this Project
PC with Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 10GB HDD amp VB60
Programmer skills
Visual Basic 60 Active Dlls ActiveX
End-user Skills
Basic Operating System handling
System Requirement
Computer Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 40Gb HDD VB60 Serial communication
port LPT Port
Hardware required
IR sensors Lasers Power supply D type 25 pin connector comparator IC
Global Application
Sky high building balancing
Precision balancing system
6
INTRODUCTION
What is a RobotA robot is an apparently human automaton intelligent and obedient but impersonal
machine Indeed the word robot comes from robota Czech for forced labour Yet as
robotics advances this definition is rapidly becoming old Basically a robot is a machine
designed to do a human job (excluding research robots) that is either tedious slow or
hazardous It is only relatively recently that robots have started to employ a degree of
Artificial Intelligence in their work - many robots required human operators or precise
guidance throughout their missions Slowly robots are becoming more and more
autonomous
The difference between robots and machinery is the presence of autonomy flexibility and
precision Indeed many few robots are mere extensions of machinery - but as the field
advances more and more the current fine line will widen more and more
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields Let us back-track
though and look at what could constitute a robot
Robotics is an absolutely fascinating field that interests most people - AI buff or not As
research from more serious robotics projects such as Cog and Kismet filter down into the
commercial arena we should look forward to some very interesting (and cheap) virtual
pets like Aibo and the furbies Hopefully commercial home-based robots will also be
available for a price not more than an expensive vacuum cleaner With computers
becoming more and more powerful interfacing home robots with your computer will
become a reality and house work will (hopefully) disappear
7
WHATrsquoS IN A ROBOT
Basically a robot consists of
A mechanical device such as a wheeled platform arm or other construction
capable of interacting with its environment
Sensors on or around the device that are able to sense the environment and give
useful feedback to the device
Systems that process sensory input in the context of the devices current situation
and instruct the device to perform actions in response to the situation
Mechanical platforms -- the hardware base
A robot consists of two main parts the robot body and some form of artificial
intelligence (AI) system Many different body parts can be called a robot Articulated
arms are used in welding and painting gantry and conveyor systems move parts in
factories and giant robotic machines move earth deep inside mines One of the most
interesting aspects of robots in general is their behavior which requires a form of
intelligence The simplest behavior of a robot is locomotion Typically wheels are used
as the underlying mechanism to make a robot move from one point to the next And some
force such as electricity is required to make the wheels turn under command
Motors
A variety of electric motors provide power to robots allowing them to move material
parts tools or specialized devices with various programmed motions The efficiency
rating of a motor describes how much of the electricity consumed is converted to
mechanical energy
Power supplies
Power supplies are generally provided by two types of battery Primary batteries are used
once and then discarded secondary batteries operate from a (mostly) reversible chemical
reaction and can be recharged several times Primary batteries have higher density and a
lower self-discharge rate Secondary (rechargeable) batteries have less energy than
8
primary batteries but can be recharged up to a thousand times depending on their
chemistry and environment
Sensors
Regardless of sensor hardware or software sensing and sensors can be thought of as
interacting with external events (in other words the outside world) The sensor measures
some attribute of the world The term transducer is often used interchangeably with
sensor A transducer is the mechanism or element of the sensor that transforms the
energy associated with what is being measured into another form of energy A sensor
receives energy and transmits a signal to a display or computer Sensors use transducers
to change the input signal (sound light pressure temperature etc) into an analog or
digital form capable of being used by a robot
Microcontroller systems
Microcontrollers (MCUs) are intelligent electronic devices used inside robots They
deliver functions similar to those performed by a microprocessor (central processing unit
or CPU) inside a personal computer MCUs are slower and can address less memory than
CPUs but are designed for real-world control problems One of the major differences
between CPUs and MCUs is the number of external components needed to operate them
MCUs can often run with zero external parts and typically need only an external crystal
or oscillator
There are four basic aspects of a microcontroller speed size memory and other Speed
is designated in clock cycles and is usually measured in millions of cycles per second
(Megahertz MHz) The use of the cycles varies in different MCUs affecting the usable
speed of the processor Size specifies the number of bits of information the MCU can
process in one step -- the size of its natural cluster of information
9
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Resistors
Example Circuit symbol
Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is
placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current
passing through the LED
Connecting and soldering
Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged
by heat when soldering
Resistor values - the resistor colour code
Resistance is measured in ohms the symbol for ohm is an omega
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and M
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000
Resistor values are normally shown using coloured bands
Each colour represents a number as shown in the table
Most resistors have 4 bands
The first band gives the first digit
The second band gives the second digit
The third band indicates the number of zeros
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor this may
be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given below
The Resistor
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
White 9
10
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SNO CONTENT PAGE NO
1 Abstract 6
2 Introduction 7
3 Component Description 10
4 Parallel Port 28
5 Power Supply 34
6 Circuit Description 41
7 Visual Basic 43
8 Coding 50
9 Conclusion 52
10 References 53
11 Appendix 54
5
ABSTRACT
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
System Required for this Project
PC with Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 10GB HDD amp VB60
Programmer skills
Visual Basic 60 Active Dlls ActiveX
End-user Skills
Basic Operating System handling
System Requirement
Computer Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 40Gb HDD VB60 Serial communication
port LPT Port
Hardware required
IR sensors Lasers Power supply D type 25 pin connector comparator IC
Global Application
Sky high building balancing
Precision balancing system
6
INTRODUCTION
What is a RobotA robot is an apparently human automaton intelligent and obedient but impersonal
machine Indeed the word robot comes from robota Czech for forced labour Yet as
robotics advances this definition is rapidly becoming old Basically a robot is a machine
designed to do a human job (excluding research robots) that is either tedious slow or
hazardous It is only relatively recently that robots have started to employ a degree of
Artificial Intelligence in their work - many robots required human operators or precise
guidance throughout their missions Slowly robots are becoming more and more
autonomous
The difference between robots and machinery is the presence of autonomy flexibility and
precision Indeed many few robots are mere extensions of machinery - but as the field
advances more and more the current fine line will widen more and more
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields Let us back-track
though and look at what could constitute a robot
Robotics is an absolutely fascinating field that interests most people - AI buff or not As
research from more serious robotics projects such as Cog and Kismet filter down into the
commercial arena we should look forward to some very interesting (and cheap) virtual
pets like Aibo and the furbies Hopefully commercial home-based robots will also be
available for a price not more than an expensive vacuum cleaner With computers
becoming more and more powerful interfacing home robots with your computer will
become a reality and house work will (hopefully) disappear
7
WHATrsquoS IN A ROBOT
Basically a robot consists of
A mechanical device such as a wheeled platform arm or other construction
capable of interacting with its environment
Sensors on or around the device that are able to sense the environment and give
useful feedback to the device
Systems that process sensory input in the context of the devices current situation
and instruct the device to perform actions in response to the situation
Mechanical platforms -- the hardware base
A robot consists of two main parts the robot body and some form of artificial
intelligence (AI) system Many different body parts can be called a robot Articulated
arms are used in welding and painting gantry and conveyor systems move parts in
factories and giant robotic machines move earth deep inside mines One of the most
interesting aspects of robots in general is their behavior which requires a form of
intelligence The simplest behavior of a robot is locomotion Typically wheels are used
as the underlying mechanism to make a robot move from one point to the next And some
force such as electricity is required to make the wheels turn under command
Motors
A variety of electric motors provide power to robots allowing them to move material
parts tools or specialized devices with various programmed motions The efficiency
rating of a motor describes how much of the electricity consumed is converted to
mechanical energy
Power supplies
Power supplies are generally provided by two types of battery Primary batteries are used
once and then discarded secondary batteries operate from a (mostly) reversible chemical
reaction and can be recharged several times Primary batteries have higher density and a
lower self-discharge rate Secondary (rechargeable) batteries have less energy than
8
primary batteries but can be recharged up to a thousand times depending on their
chemistry and environment
Sensors
Regardless of sensor hardware or software sensing and sensors can be thought of as
interacting with external events (in other words the outside world) The sensor measures
some attribute of the world The term transducer is often used interchangeably with
sensor A transducer is the mechanism or element of the sensor that transforms the
energy associated with what is being measured into another form of energy A sensor
receives energy and transmits a signal to a display or computer Sensors use transducers
to change the input signal (sound light pressure temperature etc) into an analog or
digital form capable of being used by a robot
Microcontroller systems
Microcontrollers (MCUs) are intelligent electronic devices used inside robots They
deliver functions similar to those performed by a microprocessor (central processing unit
or CPU) inside a personal computer MCUs are slower and can address less memory than
CPUs but are designed for real-world control problems One of the major differences
between CPUs and MCUs is the number of external components needed to operate them
MCUs can often run with zero external parts and typically need only an external crystal
or oscillator
There are four basic aspects of a microcontroller speed size memory and other Speed
is designated in clock cycles and is usually measured in millions of cycles per second
(Megahertz MHz) The use of the cycles varies in different MCUs affecting the usable
speed of the processor Size specifies the number of bits of information the MCU can
process in one step -- the size of its natural cluster of information
9
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Resistors
Example Circuit symbol
Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is
placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current
passing through the LED
Connecting and soldering
Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged
by heat when soldering
Resistor values - the resistor colour code
Resistance is measured in ohms the symbol for ohm is an omega
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and M
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000
Resistor values are normally shown using coloured bands
Each colour represents a number as shown in the table
Most resistors have 4 bands
The first band gives the first digit
The second band gives the second digit
The third band indicates the number of zeros
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor this may
be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given below
The Resistor
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
White 9
10
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
ABSTRACT
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
System Required for this Project
PC with Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 10GB HDD amp VB60
Programmer skills
Visual Basic 60 Active Dlls ActiveX
End-user Skills
Basic Operating System handling
System Requirement
Computer Minimum PIII with 256 MB Ram 40Gb HDD VB60 Serial communication
port LPT Port
Hardware required
IR sensors Lasers Power supply D type 25 pin connector comparator IC
Global Application
Sky high building balancing
Precision balancing system
6
INTRODUCTION
What is a RobotA robot is an apparently human automaton intelligent and obedient but impersonal
machine Indeed the word robot comes from robota Czech for forced labour Yet as
robotics advances this definition is rapidly becoming old Basically a robot is a machine
designed to do a human job (excluding research robots) that is either tedious slow or
hazardous It is only relatively recently that robots have started to employ a degree of
Artificial Intelligence in their work - many robots required human operators or precise
guidance throughout their missions Slowly robots are becoming more and more
autonomous
The difference between robots and machinery is the presence of autonomy flexibility and
precision Indeed many few robots are mere extensions of machinery - but as the field
advances more and more the current fine line will widen more and more
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields Let us back-track
though and look at what could constitute a robot
Robotics is an absolutely fascinating field that interests most people - AI buff or not As
research from more serious robotics projects such as Cog and Kismet filter down into the
commercial arena we should look forward to some very interesting (and cheap) virtual
pets like Aibo and the furbies Hopefully commercial home-based robots will also be
available for a price not more than an expensive vacuum cleaner With computers
becoming more and more powerful interfacing home robots with your computer will
become a reality and house work will (hopefully) disappear
7
WHATrsquoS IN A ROBOT
Basically a robot consists of
A mechanical device such as a wheeled platform arm or other construction
capable of interacting with its environment
Sensors on or around the device that are able to sense the environment and give
useful feedback to the device
Systems that process sensory input in the context of the devices current situation
and instruct the device to perform actions in response to the situation
Mechanical platforms -- the hardware base
A robot consists of two main parts the robot body and some form of artificial
intelligence (AI) system Many different body parts can be called a robot Articulated
arms are used in welding and painting gantry and conveyor systems move parts in
factories and giant robotic machines move earth deep inside mines One of the most
interesting aspects of robots in general is their behavior which requires a form of
intelligence The simplest behavior of a robot is locomotion Typically wheels are used
as the underlying mechanism to make a robot move from one point to the next And some
force such as electricity is required to make the wheels turn under command
Motors
A variety of electric motors provide power to robots allowing them to move material
parts tools or specialized devices with various programmed motions The efficiency
rating of a motor describes how much of the electricity consumed is converted to
mechanical energy
Power supplies
Power supplies are generally provided by two types of battery Primary batteries are used
once and then discarded secondary batteries operate from a (mostly) reversible chemical
reaction and can be recharged several times Primary batteries have higher density and a
lower self-discharge rate Secondary (rechargeable) batteries have less energy than
8
primary batteries but can be recharged up to a thousand times depending on their
chemistry and environment
Sensors
Regardless of sensor hardware or software sensing and sensors can be thought of as
interacting with external events (in other words the outside world) The sensor measures
some attribute of the world The term transducer is often used interchangeably with
sensor A transducer is the mechanism or element of the sensor that transforms the
energy associated with what is being measured into another form of energy A sensor
receives energy and transmits a signal to a display or computer Sensors use transducers
to change the input signal (sound light pressure temperature etc) into an analog or
digital form capable of being used by a robot
Microcontroller systems
Microcontrollers (MCUs) are intelligent electronic devices used inside robots They
deliver functions similar to those performed by a microprocessor (central processing unit
or CPU) inside a personal computer MCUs are slower and can address less memory than
CPUs but are designed for real-world control problems One of the major differences
between CPUs and MCUs is the number of external components needed to operate them
MCUs can often run with zero external parts and typically need only an external crystal
or oscillator
There are four basic aspects of a microcontroller speed size memory and other Speed
is designated in clock cycles and is usually measured in millions of cycles per second
(Megahertz MHz) The use of the cycles varies in different MCUs affecting the usable
speed of the processor Size specifies the number of bits of information the MCU can
process in one step -- the size of its natural cluster of information
9
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Resistors
Example Circuit symbol
Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is
placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current
passing through the LED
Connecting and soldering
Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged
by heat when soldering
Resistor values - the resistor colour code
Resistance is measured in ohms the symbol for ohm is an omega
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and M
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000
Resistor values are normally shown using coloured bands
Each colour represents a number as shown in the table
Most resistors have 4 bands
The first band gives the first digit
The second band gives the second digit
The third band indicates the number of zeros
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor this may
be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given below
The Resistor
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
White 9
10
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
INTRODUCTION
What is a RobotA robot is an apparently human automaton intelligent and obedient but impersonal
machine Indeed the word robot comes from robota Czech for forced labour Yet as
robotics advances this definition is rapidly becoming old Basically a robot is a machine
designed to do a human job (excluding research robots) that is either tedious slow or
hazardous It is only relatively recently that robots have started to employ a degree of
Artificial Intelligence in their work - many robots required human operators or precise
guidance throughout their missions Slowly robots are becoming more and more
autonomous
The difference between robots and machinery is the presence of autonomy flexibility and
precision Indeed many few robots are mere extensions of machinery - but as the field
advances more and more the current fine line will widen more and more
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields Let us back-track
though and look at what could constitute a robot
Robotics is an absolutely fascinating field that interests most people - AI buff or not As
research from more serious robotics projects such as Cog and Kismet filter down into the
commercial arena we should look forward to some very interesting (and cheap) virtual
pets like Aibo and the furbies Hopefully commercial home-based robots will also be
available for a price not more than an expensive vacuum cleaner With computers
becoming more and more powerful interfacing home robots with your computer will
become a reality and house work will (hopefully) disappear
7
WHATrsquoS IN A ROBOT
Basically a robot consists of
A mechanical device such as a wheeled platform arm or other construction
capable of interacting with its environment
Sensors on or around the device that are able to sense the environment and give
useful feedback to the device
Systems that process sensory input in the context of the devices current situation
and instruct the device to perform actions in response to the situation
Mechanical platforms -- the hardware base
A robot consists of two main parts the robot body and some form of artificial
intelligence (AI) system Many different body parts can be called a robot Articulated
arms are used in welding and painting gantry and conveyor systems move parts in
factories and giant robotic machines move earth deep inside mines One of the most
interesting aspects of robots in general is their behavior which requires a form of
intelligence The simplest behavior of a robot is locomotion Typically wheels are used
as the underlying mechanism to make a robot move from one point to the next And some
force such as electricity is required to make the wheels turn under command
Motors
A variety of electric motors provide power to robots allowing them to move material
parts tools or specialized devices with various programmed motions The efficiency
rating of a motor describes how much of the electricity consumed is converted to
mechanical energy
Power supplies
Power supplies are generally provided by two types of battery Primary batteries are used
once and then discarded secondary batteries operate from a (mostly) reversible chemical
reaction and can be recharged several times Primary batteries have higher density and a
lower self-discharge rate Secondary (rechargeable) batteries have less energy than
8
primary batteries but can be recharged up to a thousand times depending on their
chemistry and environment
Sensors
Regardless of sensor hardware or software sensing and sensors can be thought of as
interacting with external events (in other words the outside world) The sensor measures
some attribute of the world The term transducer is often used interchangeably with
sensor A transducer is the mechanism or element of the sensor that transforms the
energy associated with what is being measured into another form of energy A sensor
receives energy and transmits a signal to a display or computer Sensors use transducers
to change the input signal (sound light pressure temperature etc) into an analog or
digital form capable of being used by a robot
Microcontroller systems
Microcontrollers (MCUs) are intelligent electronic devices used inside robots They
deliver functions similar to those performed by a microprocessor (central processing unit
or CPU) inside a personal computer MCUs are slower and can address less memory than
CPUs but are designed for real-world control problems One of the major differences
between CPUs and MCUs is the number of external components needed to operate them
MCUs can often run with zero external parts and typically need only an external crystal
or oscillator
There are four basic aspects of a microcontroller speed size memory and other Speed
is designated in clock cycles and is usually measured in millions of cycles per second
(Megahertz MHz) The use of the cycles varies in different MCUs affecting the usable
speed of the processor Size specifies the number of bits of information the MCU can
process in one step -- the size of its natural cluster of information
9
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Resistors
Example Circuit symbol
Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is
placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current
passing through the LED
Connecting and soldering
Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged
by heat when soldering
Resistor values - the resistor colour code
Resistance is measured in ohms the symbol for ohm is an omega
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and M
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000
Resistor values are normally shown using coloured bands
Each colour represents a number as shown in the table
Most resistors have 4 bands
The first band gives the first digit
The second band gives the second digit
The third band indicates the number of zeros
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor this may
be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given below
The Resistor
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
White 9
10
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
WHATrsquoS IN A ROBOT
Basically a robot consists of
A mechanical device such as a wheeled platform arm or other construction
capable of interacting with its environment
Sensors on or around the device that are able to sense the environment and give
useful feedback to the device
Systems that process sensory input in the context of the devices current situation
and instruct the device to perform actions in response to the situation
Mechanical platforms -- the hardware base
A robot consists of two main parts the robot body and some form of artificial
intelligence (AI) system Many different body parts can be called a robot Articulated
arms are used in welding and painting gantry and conveyor systems move parts in
factories and giant robotic machines move earth deep inside mines One of the most
interesting aspects of robots in general is their behavior which requires a form of
intelligence The simplest behavior of a robot is locomotion Typically wheels are used
as the underlying mechanism to make a robot move from one point to the next And some
force such as electricity is required to make the wheels turn under command
Motors
A variety of electric motors provide power to robots allowing them to move material
parts tools or specialized devices with various programmed motions The efficiency
rating of a motor describes how much of the electricity consumed is converted to
mechanical energy
Power supplies
Power supplies are generally provided by two types of battery Primary batteries are used
once and then discarded secondary batteries operate from a (mostly) reversible chemical
reaction and can be recharged several times Primary batteries have higher density and a
lower self-discharge rate Secondary (rechargeable) batteries have less energy than
8
primary batteries but can be recharged up to a thousand times depending on their
chemistry and environment
Sensors
Regardless of sensor hardware or software sensing and sensors can be thought of as
interacting with external events (in other words the outside world) The sensor measures
some attribute of the world The term transducer is often used interchangeably with
sensor A transducer is the mechanism or element of the sensor that transforms the
energy associated with what is being measured into another form of energy A sensor
receives energy and transmits a signal to a display or computer Sensors use transducers
to change the input signal (sound light pressure temperature etc) into an analog or
digital form capable of being used by a robot
Microcontroller systems
Microcontrollers (MCUs) are intelligent electronic devices used inside robots They
deliver functions similar to those performed by a microprocessor (central processing unit
or CPU) inside a personal computer MCUs are slower and can address less memory than
CPUs but are designed for real-world control problems One of the major differences
between CPUs and MCUs is the number of external components needed to operate them
MCUs can often run with zero external parts and typically need only an external crystal
or oscillator
There are four basic aspects of a microcontroller speed size memory and other Speed
is designated in clock cycles and is usually measured in millions of cycles per second
(Megahertz MHz) The use of the cycles varies in different MCUs affecting the usable
speed of the processor Size specifies the number of bits of information the MCU can
process in one step -- the size of its natural cluster of information
9
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Resistors
Example Circuit symbol
Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is
placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current
passing through the LED
Connecting and soldering
Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged
by heat when soldering
Resistor values - the resistor colour code
Resistance is measured in ohms the symbol for ohm is an omega
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and M
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000
Resistor values are normally shown using coloured bands
Each colour represents a number as shown in the table
Most resistors have 4 bands
The first band gives the first digit
The second band gives the second digit
The third band indicates the number of zeros
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor this may
be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given below
The Resistor
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
White 9
10
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
primary batteries but can be recharged up to a thousand times depending on their
chemistry and environment
Sensors
Regardless of sensor hardware or software sensing and sensors can be thought of as
interacting with external events (in other words the outside world) The sensor measures
some attribute of the world The term transducer is often used interchangeably with
sensor A transducer is the mechanism or element of the sensor that transforms the
energy associated with what is being measured into another form of energy A sensor
receives energy and transmits a signal to a display or computer Sensors use transducers
to change the input signal (sound light pressure temperature etc) into an analog or
digital form capable of being used by a robot
Microcontroller systems
Microcontrollers (MCUs) are intelligent electronic devices used inside robots They
deliver functions similar to those performed by a microprocessor (central processing unit
or CPU) inside a personal computer MCUs are slower and can address less memory than
CPUs but are designed for real-world control problems One of the major differences
between CPUs and MCUs is the number of external components needed to operate them
MCUs can often run with zero external parts and typically need only an external crystal
or oscillator
There are four basic aspects of a microcontroller speed size memory and other Speed
is designated in clock cycles and is usually measured in millions of cycles per second
(Megahertz MHz) The use of the cycles varies in different MCUs affecting the usable
speed of the processor Size specifies the number of bits of information the MCU can
process in one step -- the size of its natural cluster of information
9
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Resistors
Example Circuit symbol
Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is
placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current
passing through the LED
Connecting and soldering
Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged
by heat when soldering
Resistor values - the resistor colour code
Resistance is measured in ohms the symbol for ohm is an omega
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and M
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000
Resistor values are normally shown using coloured bands
Each colour represents a number as shown in the table
Most resistors have 4 bands
The first band gives the first digit
The second band gives the second digit
The third band indicates the number of zeros
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor this may
be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given below
The Resistor
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
White 9
10
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Resistors
Example Circuit symbol
Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is
placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current
passing through the LED
Connecting and soldering
Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged
by heat when soldering
Resistor values - the resistor colour code
Resistance is measured in ohms the symbol for ohm is an omega
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and M
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000
Resistor values are normally shown using coloured bands
Each colour represents a number as shown in the table
Most resistors have 4 bands
The first band gives the first digit
The second band gives the second digit
The third band indicates the number of zeros
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor this may
be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given below
The Resistor
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
White 9
10
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
This resistor has red (2) violet (7) yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands
So its value is 270000 = 270 k
On circuit diagrams the is usually omitted and the value is written 270K
Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
The standard colour code cannot show values of less than 10 To show these small
values two special colours are used for the third band gold which means times 01 and silver
which means times 001 The first and second bands represent the digits as normal
For example
red violet gold bands represent 27 times 01 = 27
green blue silver bands represent 56 times 001 = 056
Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the colour code Tolerance is
the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage For example a 390 resistor
with a tolerance of plusmn10 will have a value within 10 of 390 between 390 - 39 = 351
and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10 of 390)
A special colour code is used for the fourth band tolerance
silver plusmn10 gold plusmn5 red plusmn2 brown plusmn1
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is plusmn20
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values are rarely
required
11
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Transistors
Function
Transistors amplify current for example they can be used to amplify the small output
current from a logic chip so that it can operate a lamp relay or other high current device
In many circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a changing voltage
so the transistor is being used to amplify voltage
A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current or fully off
with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on)
The amount of current amplification is called the current gain symbol hFE
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP
with different circuit symbols The letters refer to the layers
of semiconductor material used to make the transistor Most
transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest
type to make from silicon If you are new to electronics it is
best to start by learning how to use NPN transistors
The leads are labeled base (B) collector (C) and emitter (E)
These terms refer to the internal operation of a transistor but they are not much help in
understanding how a transistor is used so just treat them as labels
A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current gain
In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors there are field-effect transistors
which are usually referred to as FETs They have different circuit symbols and properties
and they are not (yet) covered by this page
Transistor circuit symbols
12
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected transistor
may be damaged instantly when you
switch on
If you are lucky the orientation of the
transistor will be clear from the PCB or
stripboard layout diagram otherwise you will need to refer to a suppliers catalogue to
identify the leads
The drawings on the right show the leads for some of the most common case styles
Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams
which show the view from above
Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the transistor body A standard crocodile clip can be used as a heat
sink
Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent heat sink (described below)
which may be required for a power transistor to prevent it overheating during operation
Transistor leads for some common case styles
Crocodile clip
13
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing through
them Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because they pass
large currents If you find that a transistor is becoming too hot to touch it certainly needs
a heat sink The heat sink helps to dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the
surrounding air
Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that
the amplified current from the first is amplified further by the second transistor This
gives the Darlington pair a very high current gain such as 10000 Darlington pairs are
sold as complete packages containing the two transistors They have three leads
(B C and E) which are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor
You can make up your own Darlington pair from two transistors
For example
For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220
For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40
The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 times hFE2 = 220 times 40 = 8800
The pairs maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as TR2
Heat sink
14
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
LED
Example Circuit symbol
Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is the
short lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs If you can see inside
the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an official identification
method)
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are very
slow No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs
15
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power supply
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much current will pass through and burn
it out
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to a safe value for quick testing
purposes a 1k resistor is suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or less
Remember to connect the LED the correct way round
Colours of LEDs
LEDs are available in red orange amber yellow green blue and white Blue and white
LEDs are much more expensive than the other colours
The colour of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material not by the colouring
of the package (the plastic body) LEDs of all colours are available in uncoloured
packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as water clear) The
coloured packages are also available as diffused (the standard type) or transparent
16
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Capacitors
Function
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits because it
takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth varying DC
supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter circuits because
capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC (constant) signals
Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large capacitance means that
more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F However 1F is
very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6 (millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are man
types of capacitor with different labeling systems
Capacitor Colour Code
A colour code was used on polyester capacitors for many years It is
now obsolete but of course there are many still around The colours
should be read like the resistor code the top three colour bands giving
the value in pF Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage
rating) For example brown black orange means 10000pF = 10nF =
001microF Note that there are no gaps between the colour bands so 2 identical bands
actually appear as a wide band For example wide red yellow means 220nF = 022microF
Different types of capacitors
Colour Code
Colour Number
Black 0
Brown 1
Red 2
Orange 3
Yellow 4
Green 5
Blue 6
Violet 7
Grey 8
17
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Electrolytic Capacitors Ceramic Capacitor
An electrolytic capacitor is a type of capacitor typically with a larger capacitance per
unit volume than other types making them valuable in relatively high-current and low-
frequency electrical circuits This is especially the case in power-supply filters where
they store charge needed to moderate output voltage and current fluctuations in rectifier
output and especially in the absence of rechargeable batteries that can provide similar
low-frequency current capacity They are also widely used as coupling capacitors in
circuits where AC should be conducted but DC should not the large value of the
capacitance allows them to pass very low frequencies
A Ceramic Capacitor is a capacitor constructed of alternating layers of metal and
ceramic with the ceramic material acting as the dielectric Depending on the dielectric
whether Class 1 or Class 2 the degree of temperaturecapacity dependence varies A
ceramic capacitor often has (especially the class 2) high dissipation factor high
frequency coefficient of dissipation Capacity depends on applied voltage and capacity
changes with aging Ceramic capacitors are used extensively in common low-precision
coupling and filtering applications They are suitable for high frequencies
A ceramic capacitor is a two-terminal non-polar device The classical ceramic capacitor
is the disk capacitor This device pre-dates the transistor and was used extensively in
vacuum-tube equipment (eg radio receivers)
Diodes
18
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol
shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a
valve and early diodes were actually called valves
Example Circuit symbol
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person
pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a
conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal
diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost
constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep
characteristic (current-voltage graph)
Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits because
it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction However
all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded
the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction this is called
breakdown
Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes which pass small currents of
100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents In addition there are
LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the bottom of this page)
19
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Connecting and soldering
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labelled a or + for
anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labelled with their code in small print
you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small signal diodes
can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you are using a
germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use a heat sink
clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard crocodile clip can be
used as a heat sink
Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for soldering
them
Testing diodes
You can use a multimeter or a simple tester (battery resistor and LED) to check that a
diode conducts in one direction but not the other A lamp may be used to test a
rectifier diode but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the large current
passed by the lamp will destroy the diode
Signal diodes (small current)
20
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits so they are
only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA General purpose signal diodes such
as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have a forward voltage drop of 07V
Germanium diodes
Such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 02V and this makes them
suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract the audio signal from the weak
radio signal
For general use where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important silicon
diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when soldering they have
a lower resistance when conducting and they have very low leakage currents when a
reverse voltage is applied Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to convert
alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) a process called rectification They are
also used elsewhere in circuits where a large current must pass through the diode All
rectifier diodes are made from silicon and therefore have a forward voltage drop of 07V
The table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current of
less than 1A
Bridge rectifiers
DiodeMaximum
Current
Maximum
Reverse
Voltage
1N4001 1A 50V
1N4002 1A 100V
1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
1N5408 3A 1000V
21
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to
DC The bridge rectifier is one of them and it is available in special packages containing
the four diodes required Bridge rectifiers are rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage They have four leads or terminals the two DC outputs are
labeled + and - the two AC inputs are labeled
The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC Notice
how alternate pairs of diodes conduct
Transformer
A transformer makes use of Faradays law and the ferromagnetic properties of an iron
core to efficiently raise or lower AC voltages It of course cannot increase power so that
if the voltage is raised the current is proportionally lowered and vice versa
22
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Flywheel Energy Storage
Overview
A flywheel in essence is a mechanical battery - simply a mass rotating about an axis
Flywheels store energy mechanically in the form of kinetic energy They take an
electrical input to accelerate the rotor up to speed by using the built-in motor and return
the electrical energy by using this same motor as a generator Flywheels are one of the
oldest and most common mechanical devises in existence They may still prove to serve
us as an important component on tomorrows vehicles and future energy needs Flywheels
are one of the most promising technologies for replacing conventional lead acid batteries
as energy storage systems for a variety of applications including automobiles
economical rural electrification systems and stand-alone remote power units commonly
used in the telecommunications industry Recent advances in the mechanical properties of
composites has rekindled interest in using the inertia of a spinning wheel to store energy
23
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
In addition to energy density flywheel energy storage systems (FES) also offer several
important advantages over chemical energy storage The rate at which energy can be
exchanged into or out of the battery is limited only by the motor--generator design
Therefore it is possible to withdraw large amounts of energy in a far shorter time than
with traditional chemical batteries Indeed research into exploiting this property of FES
systems to get short intense bursts of energy is ongoing with the most notable projects
being a magnetic tank gun and a fusion ignition system Of course it is also possible to
quickly charge FES batteries making them desirable for application in electric cars where
the charge time could be dropped from a matter of hours to a matter of minutes
Advantages Flywheels store energy very efficiently (high turn-around efficiency) and
have the potential for very high specific power compared with batteries Flywheels have
very high output potential and relatively long life Flywheels are relatively unaffected by
ambient temperature extremes
Disadvantages Current flywheels have low specific energy There are safety concerns
associated with flywheels due to their high speed rotor and the possibility of it breaking
loose and releasing all of its energy in an uncontrolled manner Flywheels are a less
mature technology than chemical batteries and the current cost is too high to make them
competitive in the market
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
A Voltage Regulator (also called a regulator) has only three legs and appears to be a
comparatively simple device but it is actually a very complex integrated circuit A
regulator converts varying input voltage and produces a constant regulated output
voltage Voltage regulators are available in a variety of outputs typically 5 volts 9 volts
and 12 volts The last two digits in the name indicate the output voltage
Introduction
It is very easy to get stabilized voltage for ICs by using a three terminal voltage regulator
The three terminal voltage regulator outputs stabilized voltage at a lower level than the
higher input voltage A voltage regulator cannot put out higher voltage than the input
voltage They are similar in appearance to a transistor The 7800 series consists of three-
terminal positive voltage regulators
These ICs are designed as fixed voltage regulators and with adequate heat sinking can
deliver output currents in excess of 1A These ICs are used to provide +5 volts and +12
volts supply Line regulation in these ICs is change in the output voltage for a change in
the input voltage Load regulation is defined as the change in output voltage for a change
in load current If there is any high voltage than 12 volt to 7812 it will convert to 12 V by
this IC If there is any voltage less than 12 volt it allows passing it FAN is used for
cooling the ICs
There are two ICs 7805 and 7812 attached with the Intel-fan heat sink From the base of
7805 IC we get the +5Volt Supply and from the base of 7812 IC we get the 12 Volt
25
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
supply Two LED are also connected with the respective ICs in order to indicate there
proper working
There are some voltage regulators
LM7805 for + 5 volts
LM7809 for +9 volts
LM7812 for+12 volts
LM7905 for-5 volts
LM7909 for-9 volts
LM7912 for-12 volts
Fig LM7805 Integrated Circuit Internal Schematic
The LM78XX series of voltage regulators are designed for positive input For
applications requiring negative input the LM79XX series is used
26
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Fig Symbol of voltage regulator Fig A LM 7805 regulator
Fig The circuit diagram represents a typical use of a voltage regulator
Note The LM7805 can reliably deliver 1 amp at a constant voltage
Input Voltage
As a general rule the input voltage should be limited to 2 to 3 volts above the output
voltage The LM78XX series can handle up to 30 volts input but the power difference
between the input voltagecurrent ratio and output voltagecurrent ratio appears as heat If
the input voltage is unnecessarily high the regulator will get very hot Unless sufficient
heat sinking is provided the regulator will shut down
27
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Parallel Port
Essentials
A first step in exploring the parallel port is learning how to get the most from a port with
your everyday applications and peripherals Things to know include how to find
configure and install a port how and when to use the new bidirectional EPP and ECP
modes and how to handle a system with multiple parallel-port peripherals
Defining the Ports
What is the parallel port In the computer world a port is a set of signal lines that the
microprocessor or CPU uses to exchange data with other components Typical uses for
ports are communicating with printers modems keyboards and displays or just about
any component Most computer ports are digital where each signal or bit is 0 or 1 A
parallel port transfers multiple bits at once while a serial port transfers a bit at a time
(though it may transfer in both directions at once)The ports explained here is about a
specific type of parallel port the one found on just about every Pc or IBM-compatible
personal computer Along with the RS-232 serial port the parallel port is a workhorse of
PC communications On newer PCs you may find other ports such as SCSI USB and
IrDA but the parallel port remains popular because its capable flexible and every PC
has one
The term PC-compatible or PC for short refers to the IBM PC and any of the
many many personal computers derived from it From another angle a PC is any
computer that can run Microsofts MS-DOS operating system and whose expansion bus is
compatible with the ISA bus in the original IBM Pc The category includes the PC XT
AT PS2 and most computers with 80x86 Pentium and compatible CPUs It does not
include the Macintosh Amiga or IBM mainframes though these and other computer
types may have ports that are similar to the parallel port on the Pc The original PCs
parallel port had eight outputs five inputs and four bidirectional lines
These are enough for communicating with many types of peripherals On many
newer PCs the eight outputs can also serve as inputs for faster communications with
scanners drives and other devices that send data to the Pc
28
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
The parallel port was designed as a printer port and many of the-original names for the
ports signals (PaperEnd AutoLineFeed) reflect that use But these days you can find all
kinds of things besides printers connected to the port The term peripheral or peripheral
device is a catch-all category that includes printers scanners modems and other devices
that connect to a Pc
29
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Accessing Ports
Windows DOS C JAVA and Visual Basic provide several ways to read and write to
parallel ports The most direct way is reading and writing to the port registers Most
programming languages include this ability or at least allow you to add it Visual Basic
includes other options including the Printer object the Print Form method and Open
LPT x Windows also has API calls for accessing LPT ports and 16-bit programs can use
BIOS and DOS software interrupts for LPT access This chapter introduces the parallel
ports signals and ways of accessing them in the programs you write
Parallel ports can be used to connect a host of popular computer peripherals
bull Printers
bull Scanners
bull CD burners
bull External hard drives
bull Iomega Zip removable drives
bull Network adapters
bull Tape backup drives
30
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Pin Out Diagram Of Parallel Port
31
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Parallel Port Basics
Parallel ports were originally developed by IBM as a way to connect a printer to our PC
When IBM was in the process of designing the PC the company wanted the computer to
work with printers offered by Centronics a top printer manufacturer at the time IBM
decided not to use the same port interface on the computer that Centronics used on the
printer
Instead IBM engineers coupled a 25-pin connector DB-25 with a 36-pin Centronics
connector to create a special cable to connect the printer to the computer Other printer
manufacturers ended up adopting the Centronics interface making this strange hybrid
cable an unlikely de facto standard
When a PC sends data to a printer or other device using a parallel port it sends 8 bits of
data (1 byte) at a time These 8 bits are transmitted parallel to each other as opposed to
the same eight bits being transmitted serially (all in a single row) through a serial port
The standard parallel port is capable of sending 50 to 100 kilobytes of data per second
Lets take a closer look at what each pin does when used with a printer
bull Pin 1 carries the strobe signal It maintains a level of between 28 and 5 volts but drops
below 05 volts whenever the computer sends a byte of data This drop in voltage tells
the printer that data is being sent
Pins 2 through 9 are used to carry data To indicate that a bit has a value of 1 a
charge of 5 volts is sent through the correct pin No charge on a pin indicates avalue of
0 This is a simple but highly effective way to transmit digital information over an
analog cable in real-time
bull Pin 10 sends the acknowledge signal from the printer to the computer Like Pin 1 it
maintains a charge and drops the voltage below 05 volts to let the computer know that
the data was received
32
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
bull If the printer is busy it will charge Pin 11 Then it will drop the voltage below
05 volts to let the computer know it is ready to receive more data
bull The printer lets the computer know if it is out of paper by sending a charge on Pin 12
bull As long as the computer is receiving a charge on Pin 13 it knows that the device
is online
bull The computer sends an auto feed signal to the printer through Pin 14 using a 5-
volt charge
bull If the printer has any problems it drops the voltage to less than 05 volts on Pin
15 to let the computer know that there is an error
bull Whenever a new print job is ready the computer drops the charge on Pin 16 to
initialize the printer
bull Pin 17 is used by the computer to remotely take the printer offline This is
accomplished by sending a charge to the printer and maintaining it as long as you
want the printer offline
bull Pins 18-25 are grounds and are used as a reference signal for the low (below 05
volts) charge
33
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Power Supply
Types of Power Supply
There are many types of power supply Most are designed to convert high voltage AC
mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronics circuits and other
devices A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks each of which
performs a particular function
For example a 5V regulated supply
Each of the blocks is described in more detail below
Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC
Rectifier - converts AC to DC but the DC output is varying
Smoothing - smooths the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram and a
graph of their output
Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
Dual Supplies
34
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Some electronic circuits require a power supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V) This is called a dual supply because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the diagram
Dual supplies have three outputs for example a plusmn9V supply has +9V 0V and -9V
outputs
Transformer only
The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps heaters and special AC motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps heaters and standard motors It is not
suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
35
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
The smooth DC output has a small ripple It is suitable for most electronic circuits
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
The regulated DC output is very smooth with no ripple It is suitable for all electronic
circuits
Transformer
36
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Circuit Symbol
Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to another with little loss of power
Transformers work only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains electricity is
AC
Step-up transformers increase voltage step-down transformers reduce voltage Most
power supplies use a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously high mains
voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage
The input coil is called the primary and the output coil is called the secondary There is
no electrical connection between the two coils instead they are linked by an alternating
magnetic field created in the soft-iron core of the transformer The two lines in the middle
of the circuit symbol represent the core
Transformers waste very little power so the power out is (almost) equal to the power in
Note that as voltage is stepped down current is stepped up
The ratio of the number of turns on each coil called the turns ratio determines the ratio
of the voltages A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on its primary
(input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply and a small number of
turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage
turns ratio = Vp
= Np
and power out = power in
Vs Ns Vs times Is = Vp times Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil
Ip = primary (input) current
Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Is = secondary (output) current
Rectifier
37
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC The
bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying DC A full-wave
rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap transformer is used but this
method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper A single diode can be used as a
rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the AC wave to produce half-wave
varyingDC
Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes but it is also available in
special packages containing the four diodes required It is called a full-wave rectifier
because it uses all the AC wave (both positive and negative sections) 14V is used up in
the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 07V when conducting and there are always
two diodes conducting as shown in the diagram below Bridge rectifiers are rated by the
maximum current they can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand
(this must be at least three times the supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand
the peak voltages) Please see the Diodes page for more details including pictures of
bridge rectifiers
Bridge rectifierAlternate pairs of diodes
conduct changing over the connections
so the alternating directions of AC are
converted to the one direction of DC
Output full-wave varying DC
(using all the AC wave)
Single diode rectifier
38
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC which
has gaps when the AC is negative It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well to supply
electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the smoothing capacitor
does not significantly discharge during the gaps Please see the Diodes page for some
examples of rectifier diodes
Single diode rectifierOutput half-wave varying DC
(using only half the AC wave)
Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the DC
supply to act as a reservoir supplying current to the output when the varying DC voltage
from the rectifier is falling The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying DC (dotted line)
and the smoothed DC (solid line) The capacitor charges quickly near the peak of the
varying DC and then discharges as it supplies current to the output
39
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the peak
value (14 times RMS value) For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC of about
46V RMS (14V is lost in the bridge rectifier) with smoothing this increases to almost
the peak value giving 14 times 46 = 64V smooth DC
Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges
giving a small ripple voltage For many circuits a ripple which is 10 of the supply
voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for the
smoothing capacitor A larger capacitor will give less ripple The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC Smoothing capacitor for 10
ripple C =
5 times
Io
Vs
times f
C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)
Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V) this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with fixed (typically 5
12 and 15V) or variable output voltages They are also
rated by the maximum current they can pass Negative
voltage regulators are available mainly for use in dual
supplies Most regulators include some automatic
Voltage Regulator
40
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
protection from excessive current (overload protection) and overheating (thermal
protection)
Many of the fixed voltage regulator ICs have 3 leads and look like power transistors such
as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right They include a hole for attaching a
heatsink if necessary
CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DISCRIPTION
In this project following circuits are used Power supply circuit Transmitter circuit Receiver circuit
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A +12V DC supply is needed for our circuit for this we use regulated power supply An
ideal regulated power supply is an electronic circuit designed to provide a predetermined
DC voltage which is independent of current drawn temperature and any variation in line
This circuit comprise of a transformer a bridge rectifier a prod filter and a regulator IC
7812 Also for testing purpose a 5 volt DC regulated power supply is also made by
using regulator IC 7805
41
LED
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Fig power supply circuit
Values of components are-
C1= 001microF C2 = 2200 microF 35 V C3 = 470 microF 35 V
R = 330 Ω IP = 220 V AC
All diodes are 1N4007
The transformer is used to convert 220 V AC to 12 V AC supply a bridge rectifier circuit
consisting four IN4770 diode used to convert the AC supply to pulsating DC supply A
capacitor C1 in parallel to each diode of bridge circuit is used for spike control A п filter
is used to filter out DC component from pulsating DC supply The filter circuit allowed
only DC component to pass through it at the output A diode and a capacitor parallel to
the choke of filter is used to short the circuit Regulator IC is used to provide a regulated
12V DC supply A capacitor between itrsquos input terminal and common terminal is used for
protection against black out and a capacitor between itrsquos output terminal and common
terminal is used for spike control
To indicate that supply is available at the output terminal or not a LED in series with a
resistance is
VISUAL BASIC
7812
7805
IP
T
C1C1
C1
C1
C2 C2C3
C3 C1
C1
R
R
42
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Why We use Visual Basic
Visual Basic provides a convenient method for building user interfaces it can interface
with code written in the c for efficiency Other graphical user (GUI) is not as good as VB
is Through VB user can draw pictures buttons text boxes and other user interface
items User adds little snippets of code to handle the user interaction user adds the
initialization code as the last step and user can add more complex function if he wants
but not many
Features of Visual Basic
Compiled and interpreted
Object Oriented
Robust and secure
Distributed
Familiar small and simple
The Visual Basic
The Visual Basic has three distinct states Design Run and Debug The
Current state appears in Visual Basic is title bar This chapter concentrates on the Design
state Wersquoll cover the Debug state later in the book (In the Run state Visual Basic is in
the background while your program runs) Itrsquos the Design state thatrsquos Become complex
over the years and wersquoll lay it bare in this chapter
Visual Basic is composed of these parts
43
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
ldquoThe menu bar
ldquoThe toolbar
ldquoThe Project Explorer
ldquoThe Properties window
ldquoThe Form Layout window
ldquoThe toolbox
ldquoForm designers
ldquoCode windows
The Menu Bar
The menu bar presents the Visual Basic menus Herersquos a list of those menus and
What they do
ldquoFile handling and printing also used to make EXE files
ldquoEdit Standard editing functions undo and searches
ldquoView Displays or hides windows and toolbars
ldquoProject Sets project properties addsremoves forms and modules and
Addsremoves references and components
ldquoFormat Aligns or sizes controls
ldquoDebug Startsstops debugging and stepping through programs
ldquoRun Starts a program or compiles and starts it
ldquoTools Adds procedures starts the Menu Editor sets IDE options
ldquoAdd Ins_Add-in manager lists add-ins like Application Wizard and API Viewer
ldquoWindow Arranges or selects open windows
ldquoHelp Handles Help and the about box
The Toolbar
This toolbar contains buttons matching popular menu items
A form designer and code window
44
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Form designers are really just windows in which a particular form appears You can place
controls into a form simply by drawing them after clicking the corresponding controlrsquos
tool in the toolbox
Code windows are similarly easy to understand you just place the code you want to
attach to an object in the code window (to open an objectrsquos code in the code
window just double-click that object) There are two drop-down list boxes at the
top of the code window the left list lets you select the object to add code to and the
right list lets you select the procedure to add
Managing Forms In Visual Basic
Setting Title Bar Text
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Adding Toolbars to Forms
Adding Status Bars to Forms
Referring To the Current Form
Redrawing Form Contents
Setting Control Tab Order
Moving and Sizing Controls from Code
Showing and Hiding Controls in a Form
Measurements in Forms
Working with Multiple Forms
Loading Showing And Hiding Forms
Setting the Startup Form
Creating Forms in Code
Using the Multiple Document Interface
Arranging MDI Child Windows
Opening New MDI Child Windows
The Parts of a Form
45
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Forms are the names for windows in Visual Basic (originally you called windows Under
design forms and the actual result when running a window but common Usage has
named both forms now) and you add controls to forms in the Integrated Development
Environment Wearer designing a form in the Visual Basic IDE and you can see several
aspects of forms there At the top of the form is the title bar which displays The formrsquos
title here that is just Form1 At right in the title bar is the control box including the
minimizingmaximizing buttons and the close button These are Controls the user takes
for granted in most windows although wersquoll see they are Inappropriate in others (such as
dialog boxes) A form under design Under the title bar comes the menu bar if there is
one the form has one menu the File menu
Under the menu bar forms can have toolbars as you see in the IDE itself
The main area of a form the area where everything takes place is called the client Area In
general Visual Basic code works with controls in the client area and leaves The rest of
the form to Visual Basic (in fact the client area is itself a window) In We added a
control a command button to the form
Finally the whole form is surrounded by a border and there are several types of
Borders that you can use
The Parts of an MDI Form
Besides standard forms Visual Basic also supports MDI forms A MDI form
A MDI form
You can see that an MDI form looks much like a standard form with one major
difference of course the client area of an MDI form acts like a kind of corral for other
forms That is an MDI form can display MDI child forms in it
Which is how the multiple document interfaces works we have two documents open in
the MDI form thatrsquos the third type of form you can have in Visual Basic_MDI child
forms
These forms appear in MDI child windows but otherwise are very similar to standard
forms those then are the three types of forms available to us in
46
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Visual Basic standard forms MDI forms and MDI child forms Wersquoll work with all of
them in this Chapter In fact we are ready to start getting into the details now as we turn
to the Immediate Solutions section of this chapter
Immediate Solutions
Setting Title Bar Text
Yoursquove submitted your project to the user-testing stage and feel smug What could go
wrong Suddenly the phone rings seems they donrsquot like the title in the programrsquos
Title bar Project1
This stymies a lot of Visual Basic programmers because the text in the title
Bar Seems like something that Windows itself manages not the program In fact itrsquos up
To the program and setting the text in the title bar couldnrsquot be easier At design time you
just change the formrsquos Caption property Setting a formrsquos caption
You can also set the Caption property at runtime in code like this
Private Sub Command1_Click ()
Me Caption = Hello from Visual Basic
End Sub
AddingRemoving MinMax Buttons and Setting a Windowrsquos Border
Forms usually come with minimizing and maximizing buttons as well as a close Box at
the upper right However thatrsquos not appropriate in all cases
To remove these buttons you can set the formrsquos Control Box property to False as default
Removing the control box from a form
TIP If you are thinking of designing a dialog box take a look at _Creating Dialog
Boxes_ later in this chapter besides removing the control box you should also set the
dialogrsquos border correctly ads OK and Cancel buttons and take care of a few more
considerations You can also set what buttons are in a form by setting its border type For
47
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
example If you set the border style to a fixed type the minimizing and maximizing
buttons Will disappear
Setting a Formrsquos Border
You set a formrsquos border style with its Border Style property here are the possible
Values for that property
ldquo0_None
ldquo1_Fixed Single
ldquo2_Sizable
ldquo3_Fixed Dialog
ldquo4_Fixed Tool window
ldquo5_Sizable Tool window
Adding Toolbars to Forms
For some reason adding toolbars to forms isnrsquot covered in a lot of Visual Basic books
However users have come to expect toolbars in more complex programs and wersquoll see
how to add them here Toolbars provide Buttons that correspond to menu items and give
the user an easy way to select the commands those items
VISUAL BASIC OBJECTS
Visual Basic programs display a Windows style screen (called a form) with boxes into
which Users type (and edit) information and buttons that they click to initiate actions
The boxes and Buttons are referred to as controls Forms and controls are called objects
In this section we Examine forms and four of the most useful Visual Basic controls
The Menu bar of the Visual Basic screen displays the commands you use to work with
Visual Basic Some of the menus like File Edit View and Window are common to
most Windows applications Others such as Project Format and Debug provide
48
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
commands specificto programming in Visual Basic The Toolbar is a collection of icons
that carry out standard operations when clicked For Example the fifth icon which looks
like a diskette can be used to save the current program To a disk To reveal the function
of a Toolbar icon position the mouse pointer over the icon for a few seconds The large
stippled Form window or form for short becomes a Windows window when A program
is executed Most information displayed by the program appears on the form The
Information usually is displayed in controls that have been placed on the form The Form
Layout window allows you to position the location of the form at run time relative to the
Entire screen using a small graphical representation of the screen
Properties window is used to change how objects look and react
The icons in the Toolbox represent controls that can be placed on the form The four
Controls discussed in this section are text boxes labels command buttons and picture
boxes
Text boxes You use a text box primarily to get information referred to as input from the
User
Labels You place a label to the left of a text box to tell the user what type of information
to enter into the text box You also use labels to display output
Command buttons The user clicks a command button to initiate an action
Picture boxes You use a picture box to display text or graphics output
CODING
49
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Dim a As Integer
Dim p As Integer
Dim q As Integer
Dim b As Integer
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Call PortOut(888 0)
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
a = 1
b = 1
Call PortOut(ampH37A 192)
Call PortOut(888 0)
End Sub
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
p = PortIn(ampH379)
q = PortIn(ampH378)
Text1Text = p
Text2Text = q
If p = 56 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 2)
b = 2
Text3ForeColor = ampHFFamp
Text3Text = Moving Clockwise
End If
If p = 88 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 0)
b = 0
50
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF00amp
Text3Text = Center Aligned
End If
If p = 248 Then
a = 1
Call PortOut(888 1)
b = 1
Text3ForeColor = ampHFF0000
Text3Text = Moving Anti-Clockwise
End If
If p = 120 Then
Call PortOut(888 b)
a = a + 1
End If
If a = 100 Then
a = 0
b = b + 1
If b = 3 Then
b = 1
End If
End If
End Sub
51
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
CONCLUSION
In our project balancing is achieved by laser mesh where flap or bot can balance in 2 axis
where 3 laser meshes give respond whenever flap obstacle been detected Respect to this
in our algorithm program will respond to motor where it is rotate clockwise anti-
clockwise If there any obstacle still lying in the path of laser mesh it will give mal-
function that generate an error message This project contain motor driving circuit power
supply with regulated output Laser transmitter and receptor circuit amp mechanical section
contains ball bearings Acrylic sheet amp few of nut Bolts
Its some of the global applications are Sky high building balancing and Precision
balancing system and is expected to be a technology to b used globally in future
The field of robotics has been around nearly as long as Artificial Intelligence - but the
field has made little progress This is only natural since the field not only attempts to
conquer intelligence but also the body that embodies it - a formidable task indeed
Robotics though is not just about humanoid robots but also about their commercial
applications in manufacturing safety and hundreds of other fields
52
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
REFERENCES
1 Richard Alami Rachid Alami Raja Chatila Hajime Asama ldquoDistributed Autonomous
Robotic Systems 6rdquo Published by Springer 2007
2 ldquoDesigning Autonomous Mobile Robots Inside the Mind of an Intelligent Machinerdquo
by John M Holland Newnes Pres 2003
3 ldquoIntroduction to Autonomous Mobile Robotsrdquo by Roland Siegwart and Illah R
Nourbakhsh MIT Press 2004
4 ldquoBoylestad and Nashelsky ldquoElectronic Devices and Circuit Theoryrdquo Pearson
Education Eighth Edition
5 ldquo Microsoft Visual Basic 60 developers workshoprdquo by John Clark Craig Jeff Webb
Edition 5 published by Wombat Technology 1998
6 ldquo Visual Basic 6 from the Ground Uprdquo by Gary Cornell published by McGraw-Hill
Professional 1998
7 ldquoBeginning Visual Basic 6 Database Programmingrdquo by John Connell Edition 2
published by Apress 2003
53
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
APPENDIX
L293DQUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
1048576 Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
1048576 Wide Supply-Voltage Range 45 V to 36 V
1048576 Separate Input-Logic Supply
1048576 Internal ESD Protection
1048576 Thermal Shutdown
1048576 High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
1048576 Functional Replacements for SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
1048576 Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
1048576 Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(12 A for L293D)
1048576 Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
Description
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers The L293 is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 45 V to 36 V The
L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages
from 45 V to 36 V Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays
solenoids dc and bipolar stepping motors as well as other high-currenthigh-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications All inputs are TTL compatible Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source Drivers are enabled in pairs with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 12EN
and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 34EN When an enable input is high the associated
54
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
drivers are enabled and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs When the
enable input is low those drivers are disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-
impedance state With the proper data inputs each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or
bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications On the L293 external
high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression A
VCC1 terminal separate from VCC2 is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device
power dissipation The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0degC to
70degC
Block Diagram
NOTE Output diodes are internal in L293D
55
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
Logic Diagram
Schematics of Inputs and Outputs (L293D)
56
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
57
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
LM324
QUADRUPLE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
2-kV ESD Protection (K-Suffix Devices) Wide Supply Range
-Single Supply 3 V to 32 V (26 V for LM2902) or Dual Supplies 15 V to 16 V
-(13 V for LM2902) Low Supply-Current Drain Independent of Supply Voltage 08 mA Typ Common-Mode Input Voltage Range Includes Ground Allowing Direct Sensing Near Ground Low Input Bias and Offset Parameters
-Input Offset Voltage 3 mV Typ A Versions 2 mV Typ -Input Offset Current 2 nA Typ -Input Bias Current 20 nA Typ A Versions 15 nA Typ Differential Input Voltage Range Equal to Maximum-Rated Supply Voltage 32 V (26 V for LM2902) Open-Loop Differential Voltage Amplification 100 VmV Typ Internal Frequency Compensation
58
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
DescriptionOrdering InformationThese devices consist of four independent high-gain frequency-compensated operational
amplifiers that are designed specifically to operate from a single supply over a wide range
of voltages Operation from split supplies also is possible if the difference between the
two supplies is 3 V to 32 V (3 V to 26 V for the LM2902) and VCC is at least 15 V
more positive than the input common-mode voltage The low supply-current drain is
independent of the magnitude of the supply voltage Applications include transducer
amplifiers dc amplification blocks and all the conventional operational-amplifier circuits
that now can be more easily implemented in single-supply-voltage systems For example
the LM124 can be operated directly from the standard 5-V supply that is used in digital
systems and easily provides the required interface electronics without requiring additional
plusmn15-V supplies
59
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
symbol (each amplifier)
60
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
61
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
62
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
63
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
64
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
65
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
ULN 2003
High Voltage High Current Darlington Amplifiers
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
74
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
75
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
76
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
77
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
78
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-
79
- COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
- Resistors
- Function
- Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
- Connecting and soldering
- Resistors may be connected either way round They are not damaged by heat when soldering
- Resistor values - the resistor colour code
-
- Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)
- Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of colour code)
-
- Transistors
-
- Function
- Connecting
- Soldering
- Heat sinks
- Darlington pair
- Connecting and soldering
- Colours of LEDs
-
- Capacitors
-
- Function
-
- Capacitor Colour Code
-
- Function
- Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves
-
- Forward Voltage Drop
- Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
- Reverse Voltage
-
- Connecting and soldering
- Bridge rectifiers
-
- Transformer
-
- Types of Power Supply
- Dual Supplies
- Transformer + Rectifier
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing
- Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing + Regulator
- Transformer
- Rectifier
-
- Single diode rectifier
-
- Smoothing
- Regulator
-